Chevrolet Impala Limited Owner Manual (GMNA … · Chevrolet Impala Limited Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.- 9085358) - 2016 - crc - 8/20/15 Introduction 3 A circle with a slash

Chevrolet Impala Limited Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.- 9085358) -2016 - crc - 8/20/15

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 23

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . 85

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 132

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 161

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 269

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 285

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 295

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, IMPALA,and the IMPALA Emblem aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applications

that may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23476241 B Second Printing ©2015 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the ownermanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


4 Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 7Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Passenger Sensing System . . . . 11Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 12Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 18Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Universal Remote System . . . . . 20

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 21Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 22E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 159ii.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 127ii.

3. Instrument Cluster 0 93ii.

4. Hazard Warning Flashers0 127ii.

5. Driver Information Center (DIC)0 104ii.

6. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 96ii.

7. Light Sensor. See DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System0 126ii.

8. Infotainment 0 132ii.

9. Power Outlets 0 90ii.

10. Center Console Shift Lever (IfEquipped). See AutomaticTransmission 0 179ii.

11. Climate Control Systems0 156ii.

12. Steering Wheel Controls 0 86ii

(If Equipped).

13. Horn 0 87ii.

14. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 86ii (Out of View).

15. Cruise Control 0 186ii.

16. Parking Brake 0 183ii.

17. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 98ii.

18. Hood Release. See Hood0 202ii.

19. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 128ii (Out of View).

Remote Trunk Release Button.See Trunk 0 31ii (Out of View).

Dome Lamp Control. SeeDome Lamps 0 129ii (Outof View).

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 184ii (Outof View).

20. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125ii.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.


8 In Brief

Press K to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 114ii for additionalinformation.

Press and holdV forapproximately one second to openthe trunk.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys 0 23ii and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation0 25ii.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 27ii.

Door Locks

Manual Locks

From outside the vehicle, use thekey in the driver door or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tolock or unlock the vehicle. From theinside, pull up or push down on themanual door lock knobs.

See Door Locks 0 29ii.

Power Door Locks

Power door lock switches arelocated on the front doors near thehandle.

Q : Press the bottom of the switchto lock all doors.


In Brief 9

K : Press the top of the switch tounlock all doors.

For more information, see:

. Power Door Locks 0 29ii.

. Delayed Locking 0 30ii.

Trunk ReleaseTo open the trunk from the outside,pressV on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 25ii.

Or, use the key in the lock cylinder,if equipped.

To open the trunk from the inside,pressV. See Trunk 0 31ii.

Windows

The power window switches are onthe driver door armrest. Eachpassenger door has a switch thatcontrols only that window.

To lower the window, press and holdthe front of the switch to the firstposition until the window is at thedesired level. To raise the window,pull up and hold the front of theswitch.

For more information, see PowerWindows 0 37ii.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment 0 42ii.


10 In Brief

To adjust the seatback, see “ManualReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks 0 43ii.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe front or rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 42ii.

Power Reclining Seatback

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks 0 43ii.

Manual Lumbar

Move the lever up or down toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 43ii.

Second Row SeatsOn vehicles with the flip and foldfeature, the bottom seat cushionscan be flipped forward and theseatback folded down to create anextended cargo area.

The vehicle also has an under seatstorage area.

See Rear Seats (Split Folding) 0 45ii.


In Brief 11

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints 0 41ii and SeatAdjustment 0 42ii.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.

. Safety Belts 0 47ii.

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 0 48ii.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 49ii.

. Lap Belt 0 52ii.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 72ii.

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags, seat‐side impact airbags, and roof‐railairbags are not affected by this.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

United States

Canada

See Passenger Sensing System0 59ii for important information.


12 In Brief

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are on the driver doorarmrest.

Press the left or right side of theselector located above the controlpad to adjust the driver orpassenger mirror. Then press thecontrol pad to move the mirror in thedesired direction.

See Power Mirrors 0 36ii.

Interior Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror to clearlyview the area behind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

If equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use or pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid the glare ofheadlamps from behind.

See Manual Rearview Mirror 0 36ii.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped, the mirror automaticallyreduces the glare of the headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror 0 36ii.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt wheel lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the wheel and pull thelever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


In Brief 13

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The center mounted dome lampoverhead comes on when a door isopened. This lamp can also beturned on by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwise.

Reading Lamps

The vehicle has reading lamps thatalso act as the dome lamp. Pressthe button near each lamp to turnthem on and off.

Map Lamps

The vehicle has map lamps on therearview mirror. Press the buttonnear each lamp to turn the maplamps on and off.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:

. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 128ii.

. Courtesy Lamps 0 128ii.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on. For vehicles first soldin Canada, the off position onlyworks when the vehicle is shiftedinto the P (Park) position.

AUTO : Automatically operates theheadlamps and other exterior lampsat normal brightness.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

# : If equipped, turns on the foglamps.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125ii

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System0 126ii

. Fog Lamps 0 128ii


14 In Brief

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering column.

8 : Single wipe, turn to8 , thenrelease. Several wipes, hold theband on8 longer.

9 : Turns the windshield wipers off.

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

X : Slow wipes.

4 : Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

Push the paddleL at the top of thelever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 87ii.


In Brief 15

Climate ControlsThis vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system. The heating,cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation can be controlled with either of thesesystems.

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air

3. Recirculation

4. Air Delivery Mode Control

5. Rear Window Defogger

6. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

7. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

8. Air Conditioning


16 In Brief

Single Zone

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air

3. Temperature Control

4. Recirculation



7. Air Conditioning

See Climate Control Systems0 156ii.


In Brief 17

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (Base)

O : Press to turn the system on andoff. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

BAND : Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or SiriusXM® (ifequipped) on the Radio withCD (Base).

f : Select radio stations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Seek or scanstations.

4 : For vehicles with RDS, press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS orSiriusXM station; or CD, MP3,or WMA song. If information isavailable during SiriusXM or CDplayback, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NoInfo” displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment 0 132ii.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For radios with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using thesix softkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages of


18 In Brief

favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or SiriusXMstations.

For radios without a FAV button, upto 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, andsix AM), can be programmed on thesix numbered buttons.

See Operation 0 133ii.

Setting the Clock

To set the time for the Radio withCD (Base):

1. Press the H button until thehour begins flashing on thedisplay. Press H a second timeand the minutes begin flashingon the display.

2. To increase or decrease thetime, do one of the followingwhile the hours or minutes areflashing:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.

. Press\ FWD ors REV.

3. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayedtime, or wait five seconds untilthe flashing stops and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock 0 89ii.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM® is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information, refer to:

. www.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349 (U.S.)

. www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio 0 139ii.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput jack on the audio faceplate.External devices such as iPods®,MP3 players, etc. can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack using a3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack cable.

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”under Auxiliary Devices 0 148ii.

Bluetooth®

If equipped with a Bluetooth system,it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth 0 148ii.


In Brief 19

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, these controls arelocated on the right side of thesteering wheel.

w : Press to go to the next radiostation stored as a favorite, or thenext track if a CD is playing.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withthe OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious radio station stored as afavorite, the next track if a CD isplaying, reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

SRCE : Press to choose betweenthe radio, CD, and auxiliaryinput jack.

+ e − e : Press to increase ordecrease volume.

¨ : Press to go to the next radiostation while in AM, FM, or XM.Press to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls 0 86ii.

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn cruise control onor off. A white indicator comes on inthe instrument cluster when cruiseis on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.


20 In Brief

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 186ii.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has three 12‐volt outletswhich can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as a cellphone or MP3 player.

On vehicles with a center console,one outlet is located inside thecenter floor console and two outletsare located at the front of theconsole bin under the instrumentpanel.

On vehicles without a centerconsole, two are located under theclimate controls and another outletfor the rear seat passengers is atthe rear of the center front seat.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 90ii.

Universal Remote System

Vehicles with the Universal RemoteSystem will have these buttonslocated in the headliner.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

See Universal Remote System0 119ii.


In Brief 21

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) which limits wheelspin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem turns on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.

. To turn traction control off, pressand release the TCS/ESCbuttonY on the instrumentpanel. The appropriate DriverInformation Center (DIC)message displays. See RideControl System Messages0 111ii.

. Press and release the TCS/ESCbuttonY again to turn ontraction control.

. To turn off both TCS and ESC,press and hold the TCS/ESCbuttonY on the instrument

panel until g illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages 0 111ii.

. Press and release the TCS/ESCbuttonY again to turn on bothsystems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 184ii.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 168ii. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 236ii.


22 In Brief

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC, display OILLIFE REMAINING. See DriverInformation Center (DIC)0 104ii.

2. Press and hold the Set/Resetbutton on the DIC for morethan five seconds. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 206ii.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel0 190ii. For all other vehicles, useonly the unleaded gasolinedescribed under Fuel 0 188ii.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 289ii.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 23

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 27Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 30Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 33Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 34

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 36Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 36Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


24 Keys, Doors, and Windows

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allowattachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain toreduce the risk of unintentionally

moving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.



Interference from radio-frequencyidentification (RFID) tags mayprevent the key from starting thevehicle. Keep RFID tags away fromthe key when starting the vehicle.

The key can be used for the ignitionand the driver door. If the vehicle isa taxi model, the key can also beused in the trunk.

If it becomes difficult to turn the keyin a vehicle lock, inspect the keyblade for debris. Periodically cleanwith a brush or pick.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If you are locked out of your vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 289ii for more information.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 299ii.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 295ii.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter functions workup to 60 m (195 ft) away from thevehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 25ii.



With Remote Start Shown, WithoutRemote Start Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) :If equipped, press to start theengine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 27ii.

Q (Lock) : Press to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinfive seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 114ii.

Pressing Q may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System 0 33ii.

K (Unlock) : Press once to unlockthe driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on. If enabled through theDIC, the parking lamps flash twiceto indicate unlocking has occurred.See Vehicle Personalization 0 114ii.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System0 33ii.

V (Remote Trunk Release) :Press and hold for aboutone second to open the trunk. Thetransmission must be in P (Park).

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm) : Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times. Press and holdL formore than two seconds to activatethe panic alarm. The turn signal

lamps flash and the horn soundsrepeatedly for 30 seconds. Thealarm turns off when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN orL is pressedagain. The ignition must be inLOCK/OFF for the panic alarmto work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it. Seeyour dealer to program newtransmitters.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. SeeKey and Lock Messages 0 110ii foradditional information.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.

. Carefully insert the tool intothe notch located along theparting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalentbattery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that allows you tostart the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioning

systems and rear window defogger.When the remote start system isactive and the vehicle has anautomatic climate control system, itwill automatically regulate the insidetemperature. Normal operation ofthese systems will return after theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view whendoing so. Check local regulations forany requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif your vehicle is low on fuel. Yourvehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 25ii.

/ (Remote Start) : This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if youhave remote start.



To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold/for at least four seconds or untilthe vehicle's turn signal lampsflash. The doors will lock.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning.

The remote start feature providestwo separate starts per ignitioncycle, each with 10 minutes ofengine running time, or one startwith a time extension. The first startmust expire or be canceled to gettwo separate 10-minute starts.

If it is the first remote start since thevehicle has been driven, repeat theprevious steps, while the engine isstill running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes from thetime you repeat the steps for remotestarting. The remote start running

time can be extended one time and30 seconds after the first remotestart.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut offautomatically after 10 minutes,unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle's key is insertedinto the ignition switch and turned toON/RUN.

To manually shut off a remote start,do any of the following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition switch out ofLOCK/OFF and then back toLOCK/OFF.

After the engine has been startedtwo times, or one time with a timeextension, the vehicle's ignitionmust be turned to ON/RUN usingthe key before the remote startprocedure can be used again.

See Ignition Positions 0 172ii forinformation regarding the ignitionpositions on your vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if any of the followoccur:

. The vehicle's key is in theignition.

. The vehicle's hood is open.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The check engine light is on.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 98ii.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. The content theft-deterrent alarmhas been activated.

. Two remote vehicle starts,or one start with a timeextension, have already beenprovided for that ignition cycle.



Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

death from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

From the outside, use the key in thedriver door or use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tolock and unlock the vehicle. Fromthe inside, use the manual or powerdoor locks.

To lock or unlock the driver sidedoor from the outside with the key,insert the key and turn it clockwiseor counterclockwise.

To lock or unlock the door from theinside, push or pull the manuallock knob.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is locatedon both front doors next to the doorhandle.

Press the top of the switch to unlockall doors or press the bottom of theswitch to lock all doors.

If the vehicle has the optionalcontent theft-deterrent system and itis armed, the power door lockswitches will be disabled. You mustuse the RKE transmitter or the keyto unlock the doors when thesystem is armed. See Vehicle AlarmSystem 0 33ii.



Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver todelay the actual locking of thedoors. When the driver power doorlock switch is pressed with the keyremoved from the ignition, and thedriver door open, a chime will soundthree times to signal that thedelayed locking system is active.When all doors have been closed,the doors will lock automaticallyafter several seconds. If any door isopened before this, the timer willreset itself once all the doors havebeen closed again.

Pressing the driver or passengerpower door lock switch again or theRKE transmitter button will overridethis feature.

Personal Choice Programming

The delayed locking feature can beturned on or off, using the DriverInformation Center (DIC) to programthis feature. See “DELAY DOORLOCK” under VehiclePersonalization 0 114ii.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will automatically lockwhen the shift lever is moved out ofP (Park). The automatic door lockingfeature cannot be disabled.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlock

The vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park) all doors will unlock.

With the vehicle stopped and theengine running, door unlocking canbe programmed through promptsdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). These prompts allowthe driver to choose various unlocksettings. For programminginformation, see VehiclePersonalization 0 114ii.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature helps prevent you fromlocking the doors while the key is inthe ignition. Always remember totake your key with you when exitingthe vehicle.

If the lock switch is pressed on thedoor that is open and the key is inthe ignition, all of the doors will lockand then the open door will unlock.A chime sounds continuously untilthe driver door is closed.

Safety LocksRear door security locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door security locks arelocated on the inside edge of eachrear door. The rear doors must beopened to access them.

To assist in finding the lock, thevehicle has the following:



To use the lock:

1. Insert the key into the securitylock slot and turn it so the slotis in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door by using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, if the vehicle hasone, by pressing the powerdoor lock switch, or by liftingthe rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from theoutside.

To cancel the rear doorsecurity lock:

1. Unlock the door and open itfrom the outside.

2. Insert the key into the securitylock slot and turn it so the slotis in the vertical position.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

Doors

Trunk

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equippedwith a power liftgate, disablethe power liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 178ii.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk from the outside,pressV on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 25ii.

Or, use the key in the lock cylinder,if equipped.

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk from the inside,pressV.

The trunk can also be opened bylowering the rear seat and pullingthe emergency trunk release handlelocated inside the trunk. See RearSeats (Split Folding) 0 45ii and“Emergency Trunk Release Handle”following.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damagethe handle.



There is a glow-in-the-dark trunkrelease handle located on the latchinside the trunk. This handle willglow following exposure to light. Pullthe release handle to open the trunkfrom the inside.

After use, return to the storedposition.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemYour vehicle may have the optionalcontent theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

To activate the theft-deterrentsystem:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the powerdoor lock switch or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. If you are using theRKE transmitter, the door doesnot need to be open.

3. Close all doors.

Once armed, the alarm will go off ifsomeone tries to enter the vehiclewithout using the RKE transmitter ora key or turns the ignition on with anincorrect key. The horn will soundand the turn signal lamps will flashfor about 30 seconds.

When the alarm is armed, the trunkmay be opened with the RKEtransmitter. The power door lockswitches are disabled and the doorsremain locked. You must use yourRKE transmitter or your key tounlock the doors when the system isarmed.

Arming with the Power LockSwitch

The alarm system will arm whenyou use either power lock switch tolock the doors while any door isopen and the key is removed fromthe ignition. The alarm system willnot arm if the trunk is open whenyou use either power lock switch tolock the doors.

Arming with the RKETransmitter

The alarm system will arm when theRKE transmitter is used to lock thedoors, if the key is not in theignition.



Disarming with the RKETransmitter

The alarm system will disarm whenthe RKE transmitter is used tounlock the doors.

The first time a remote unlockcommand is received, three flasheswill be seen and three horn chirpswill be heard to indicate an alarmcondition has occurred since lastarming.

Disarming with the Key

The alarm system will disarm whenthe key is inserted in the ignitionand turned from the LOCK/OFFposition.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 295ii.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentcluster comes on when trying tostart the vehicle, there may be a

problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers 0 224ii. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may befaulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key III+ to have anew key made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to eight keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. Thefollowing procedure is forprogramming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keysare lost or do not operate, you mustsee your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to havekeys made and programmed to thesystem.



See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has a1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If theengine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds of turning theignition to the LOCK/OFFposition in Step 3.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If you lose or damage yourPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on the driverdoor armrest.

1. Press the left or right side ofthe selector switch locatedabove the control pad, to selectthe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four buttonslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle andthe area behind it can be seen.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

= (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to heat the outside rearviewmirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Climate ControlSystems 0 156ii for moreinformation.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorPush the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of the headlampsfrom behind. This feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in a

pulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys 0 23ii.

The switches on the driver doorarmrest are used to control each ofthe windows. Each passenger doorhas its own window switch.

The power window switches workwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or whileRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 176ii.

To lower the window, press and holdthe front of the switch to the firstposition until the window is at thedesired level. To raise the window,pull up and hold the front of theswitch.

Express-Down Window

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature labeledAUTO. This lets you lower thewindow completely without holdingthe switch. Press the front of theswitch to the second position andrelease.

To stop the window while it islowering, briefly pull up on theswitch.



Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout) : The driverwindow switches also include alockout switch. Press the right sideof the switch to prevent the rearpassengers from using their windowswitches. The driver can still controlall the windows and the frontpassenger can control their ownwindow with the lockout on. Pressthe left side of the switch to return tonormal window operation. A red baron the right side of the switchindicates that the lockout is off.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow or, if equipped, extendalong the rod.

Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof switches are on theoverhead console.

The sunroof can only be operatedwhen the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 176ii.

Q (Vent/Express-Open) : Press thisswitch once to vent the sunroofwhen it is closed. When using the



vent, the sunshade should be fullyopened. The sunshade can beopened or closed manually bysliding it rearward or forward.

From the vent position, press thisswitch again to activate theexpress-open feature. Press theclose switch to stop movement ofthe sunroof. The sunshade willautomatically open when usingexpress-open.

A deflector will automatically pop upwhen the sunroof is opened. Thedeflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

R (Close) : Press and hold thisswitch until the sunroof motor stopsto close the sunroof, or release theswitch when the desired positionhas been reached.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation and noise. It could alsoplug the water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal and

roof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from sunroof.


40 Seats and Restraints

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 42Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 43Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Rear SeatsRear Seats (Split Folding) . . . . . 45

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . 52Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 53Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 55When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Passenger Sensing System . . . 59Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 64

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 64Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Infants and Young Children . . . . 67Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 69Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 71Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 72

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Securing Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79


Seats and Restraints 41

Head Restraints

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seat has headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The rear seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Center Seat

The vehicle may have a front centerseat. There are cupholders on theunderside of the seat cushion. Touse them, flip the seat cushionforward. The seat can also be used

as a storage area by lowering theseatback. See Center ConsoleStorage 0 83ii.

The seatback doubles as anarmrest for the driver or frontpassenger when the center seat isunoccupied.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.



. Raise or lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe front or rear of the control upor down.

The driver seat may have powerreclining seatbacks. See “PowerReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks 0 43ii.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

Move the lever up or down toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

Heated Front Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate two for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

The heated seats are canceledeach time the ignition is turned off.To use this feature after restartingthe vehicle, press the desired buttonagain.

Rear Seats

Rear Seats (Split Folding)

Flip and Fold Feature

On vehicles with this feature, theseat cushions flip forward and theseatbacks fold down to create anextended flat cargo area.

To flip the seat cushion and fold theseatback:

1. Make sure the front seats arenot reclined. The seat cushionwill not flip forward completelyif the front seats are reclined.



2. Flip the seat cushion forwardby pulling up on the tab in thecenter of the seat cushionwhere the seatback meets theseat bottom.

3. Lower the seatback by pullingforward on the tab on theoutboard side of the rearseatback.

To return the seats to the normalposition:

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

1. Raise the seatback and makesure it latches.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

2. Make sure the safety belts areproperly stowed over theseatback in all three seatingpositions.

3. Flip the bottom seat cushionback into place. Push downfirmly on the seat cushion tomake sure it is secure.

When the seat is not in use, theseatback should be placed in theupright, locked position, and theseat cushion should be in the downposition.

Under Seat Storage

The vehicle has a storage areaunder the rear seat. See RearStorage 0 83ii.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders 0 95ii.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.



Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 65ii or Infants and YoungChildren 0 67ii. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong

pelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position(if equipped), which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt 0 52ii for moreinformation.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system.See Passenger SensingSystem 0 59ii.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender 0 52ii.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See



“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructionson use and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Always stow the safety belt slowly.If the safety belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull thesafety belt straight out firmly tounlock the webbing, and thenrelease it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure thebelt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has shoulder belt heightadjusters for the driver and rightfront passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 48ii.



Squeeze the buttons on the sides ofthe height adjuster and move theheight adjuster to the desiredposition.

You can move the adjuster up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout squeezing the buttons tomake sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety belt

pretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash 0 53ii.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for the rearoutboard seating positions.Instructions are included with theguide.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 49ii.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender 0 52ii.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you



will wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 0 95ii.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care 0 53ii.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 96ii.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand passenger directly behindthe driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger andpassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags are

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

designed to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? 0 56ii.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can be

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

seriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The safety belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 65ii orInfants and Young Children 0 67ii.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 96ii.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.



The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of an

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

inflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 54ii.Airbags are designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.



Deployment thresholds are used topredict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. Roof-rail airbags arenot designed to inflate in rollovers or

rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 55ii.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. In



moderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant’s body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 56ii formore information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components of

the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 55ii.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh air

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

by opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,and turn off the interior lamps, andturn off the hazard warning flashersby using the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include

airbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 296ii

and Event Data Recorders0 297ii.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill be visible on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or thesymbol for on or off, will be visible.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 96ii.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.



The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is because

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure child restraints in the rear

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seat. Consider using anothervehicle to transport the childwhen a rear seat is not available.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 96ii.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbag to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbag isactive.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 96ii for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Center Front Seat) 0 79ii orSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) 0 77ii or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) 0 79ii.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.



If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 41ii.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbags for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rearseat. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even if theon indicator is not lit.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, seatmassagers, a laptop, or otherelectronic devices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two to three minutesafter the on indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 64ii

for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:

. The passenger sensing systemmay turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on the

passenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 96ii for importantsafety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 294ii.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, any of the airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GM

covers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 59ii.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 287ii.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 96ii.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 55ii. See your dealerfor service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 96ii.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if available.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 49ii. If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

If you have the choice, a childshould sit in a position with alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 49ii.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safety

restraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, the

restraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low on

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 72ii. Children canbe endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions are

important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.



Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.


{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 59ii for additional information.

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.



Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,

this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.



Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments. In thiscase, the safety belt must be used(with top tether where available) tosecure the child restraint. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (CenterFront Seat) 0 79ii or Securing ChildRestraints (Rear Seat) 0 77ii orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) 0 79ii.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCH

seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. Besure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i : Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j : Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers on the rear seatback fillerpanel. Be sure to use an anchor onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 71ii for additionalinformation.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.



If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 71ii.

This system is designed to makethe installation of child restraintseasier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Open the top tetheranchor cover to exposethe anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the head restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.



If you are using a singletether in the centerseating position without aheadrest, route the singletether over the seatback.

If you are using a dualtether in the centerseating position without aheadrest, route the dualtether over the seatback.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 72ii for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 72ii for top tetheranchor locations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 71ii.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 72ii for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front Seat)

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 71ii.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.



See Passenger Sensing System0 59ii and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 96ii for more information,including important safetyinformation.


{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 59ii for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 72ii for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 96ii.



2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side-to-sideand back-and-forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 59ii for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 83

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . 83Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Center Console Storage . . . . . . . 83

Additional Storage FeaturesConvenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersCupholders may be built into thefront center console, front portion ofthe front center seat, and reararmrest of the vehicle.

Sunglasses StorageA storage compartment forsunglasses may be located abovethe rearview mirror. Push on thecover to open the compartment.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seatarmrest, pull the tab on the armrestforward to access it.

Rear StorageFor vehicles with a split folding rearseat, there are two storage areasunderneath. Pull the tab(s) locatedby the passenger side safety beltbuckle and the driver side rear seatto access the storage areas. SeeRear Seats (Split Folding) 0 45ii formore information.

Center Console StorageFor vehicles with a front centerconsole storage area, open it bypulling up on the latch located in thefront of the console cover. Theremay be a removable tray inside.


84 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a convenience net,it is located in the rear. Use it tostore small loads as far forward aspossible. The net should not beused to store heavy loads.


Instruments and Controls 85

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 86Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 86Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 87Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 95Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . 96Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 97

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . . 98

Brake System Warning Light . . . 99Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 102Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 102Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 103Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 103Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 103

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Brake System Messages . . . . . 108Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . 108

Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . 109Engine Power Messages . . . . . 110Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . 110Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . 110Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Airbag System Messages . . . . . 112Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 112Service Vehicle Messages . . . . 112Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Transmission Messages . . . . . . 113Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . 114

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 114

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 119Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123


86 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt wheel lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the wheel and pull thelever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w (Next) : Press to go to the nextradio station stored as a favorite,or the next track if a CD is playing.

c /x (Previous/End) : Press togo to the previous radio stationstored as a favorite, go to the nexttrack if a CD is playing, reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk) : Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar® orBluetooth® systems, press and holdb / g for longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeOnStar Overview 0 299ii andBluetooth 0 148ii for moreinformation.

SRCE (Source) : Press to choosebetween the radio (AM, FM, XM),CD, and auxiliary input jack.

+ e − e (Volume) : Press toincrease or to decrease the radiovolume.

¨ (Seek) : Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM, FM,or XM. Press ¨ to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced tothe CD.



HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist) : Single wipe, turn to8,then release. Several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

9 (Off) : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes) :Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

X (Low Speed) : Slow wipes.

4 (High Speed) : Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement 0 218ii.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer

Push the paddleL at the top of thelever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers run forseveral sweeps and then either stopor return to the preset speed. Theignition key must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for this towork. See Washer Fluid 0 214ii.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

When the vehicle is low on washerfluid, the WASHER FLUID LOWADD FLUID message displays inthe Driver Information Center (DIC)for 60 seconds. When the ignition isturned off, this message displaysagain for three seconds to remindyou that the fluid level is low.

Until the fluid reservoir is refilled,every time the vehicle is started, theWASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDmessage displays in the DIC for60 seconds. See Washer FluidMessages 0 114ii.



CompassThis vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

Your dealer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicle isin P (Park).

PressT until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not change



after making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. PressT until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE fora few seconds when thecalibration is complete. TheDIC display will then return toPRESS V TO CALIBRATECOMPASS.

Clock

Without Date Display


This radio has a H button for settingthe time.

To set the time:

1. Press the H button until thehour begins flashing on thedisplay. Press H a second timeand the minutes begin flashingon the display.

2. To increase or decrease thetime, do one of the followingwhile the hours or minutes areflashing:

. Turn the f knob.



3. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayedtime, or wait five seconds untilthe flashing stops and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour, press theH button until 12H or 24H isdisplayed. Once 12H or 24H isdisplayed, turn the f knob to thedesired option to select the setting.Press the H button again to applythe setting, or let the screentime out.



With Date Display

Radio with CD (MP3)

This radio has a H button for settingthe time.

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the H button and theHR, MIN, MM, DD, and YYYY(hour, minute, month, day, andyear) display.

3. Press the pushbutton underany one of the tabs to bechanged.

4. To increase the time or date,do one of the following:

. Press the pushbutton belowthe selected tab.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

. Press ¨ SEEK.

. Press\ FWD.

5. To decrease the time or date,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

. Press © SEEK.

. Presss REV.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press the Hbutton while the radio is on. Thedate with display times out after afew seconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the H button and thenthe pushbutton under theforward arrow tab. The time12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,month, and year) display.

2. Press the pushbutton under thedesired option.

3. Press H again or press theMENU button to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has three 12-volt outletswhich can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as a cellphone or MP3 player.

On vehicles with a center console,one outlet is located inside thecenter floor console and two outletsare located at the front of theconsole bin under the instrumentpanel.

On vehicles without a centerconsole, two are located under theclimate controls and another outletfor the rear seat passengers is atthe rear of the center front seat.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.



{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 198ii.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter, itis in the console, if the vehicle hasone; otherwise, it may be located inthe center armrest of the front seat.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

To use the lighter, just push it in allthe way and let go. When it is ready,it will pop back out by itself.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Uplevel Shown, Base and Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven inkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the odometer displaysERROR, it probably has beentampered with and the numbersmight not be accurate.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it will beset at zero and a label must be puton the driver door to show the oldmileage reading of the vehicle whenthe new odometer was installed.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:

. At the gas station, the gas pumpshuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, the



gauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the fuel tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whenwhile turning a corner orspeeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. If the gaugepointer moves toward the “H”(United States) or toward theshaded thermostat (Canada), itmeans that the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating 0 212ii formore information.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 59ii.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,

grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 54ii.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages0 112ii.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 59ii for importantsafety information. The instrumentpanel has a passenger airbag statusindicator.



United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 96ii for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 108ii for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance with



the light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inON/RUN and the engine is notrunning. See Ignition Positions0 172ii.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 200ii.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow the



previous guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. A loose or missing fuel cap maycause the light to come on. SeeFilling the Tank 0 190ii. A fewdriving trips with the capproperly installed may turn thelight off.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 188ii.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 198ii. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.



If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal can go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop.

If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 258ii.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The ABS light comes on brieflywhen the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady. Thenstart the engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, butnot antilock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is alsoon, the vehicle does not haveantilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light0 99ii.

See Brake System Messages 0 108ii

for all brake-related DIC messages.



Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS andthe StabiliTrak systems, and thewarning light turns off.


Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage the

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

engine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating 0 212ii.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating 0 212ii.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages 0 112ii.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressure0 235ii.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 237ii.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.



If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarm

system is arming and one or moreof the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if thealarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Vehicle Alarm System 0 33ii.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 126ii.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps 0 128ii for more information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when the cruisecontrol is set.

This light goes out when the cruisecontrol is canceled. See CruiseControl 0 186ii.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay below the speedometer inthe instrument cluster. The DICbuttons are on the instrument panel,to the right of the instrument cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The bottom lineof the DIC shows the shift leverposition indicator. See AutomaticTransmission 0 179ii.

If equipped, the DIC also displaysthe compass direction and theoutside air temperature whenviewing the trip and fuel information.

The compass direction appears onthe top right corner of the DICdisplay. The outside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display.If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 114ii.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the instrumentcluster.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel) : Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, instantaneous economy,Active Fuel Management® indicatoron vehicles with this feature, andaverage speed.

T (Vehicle Information) : Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readings, and



compass zone and compasscalibration on vehicles with thisfeature.

U (Customization) : Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 114ii.

V (Set/Reset) : Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel) : Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km).

Trip A and Trip B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIPA or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km) since the last reset

for each trip odometer. Both tripodometers can be used at thesame time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing the set/reset button while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show 8 km

(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate number ofremaining miles (mi) orkilometers (km) the vehicle can bedriven without refueling.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. The fuel range isconstantly recalculated and therange estimate will change if drivingconditions change. For example, therange may be lower when thevehicle is driven in heavy stop andgo city traffic. If the vehicle is then



driven at a constant highway speedthe range can increase due to amore efficient driving pattern.Generally, freeway driving producesbetter fuel economy than citydriving.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW messagedisplays. See Fuel SystemMessages 0 110ii.

Average Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averagemiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of mpg (L/100 km) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset this display tozero, press and hold the set/resetbutton.

Instantaneous Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until INSTECONOMY displays. This displayshows the current fuel economy at aparticular moment and will changefrequently as driving conditions

change. This display shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in milesper gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlikeaverage economy, this screencannot be reset.

Average Speed

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE SPEED displays. Thisdisplay shows the average speed ofthe vehicle in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Toreset the value, press and hold theset/reset button. The display willreturn to zero.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information) : Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages 0 109ii.You should change the oil as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 204ii.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 270ii.



Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE yourself after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System 0 206ii.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRICunits.

Tire Pressure

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Pressthe vehicle information button untilthe DIC displays FRONT TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press

the vehicle information button againuntil the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure0 235ii and Tire Messages 0 112ii.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Change Compass Zone

Your vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see Compass0 88ii.

Calibrate Compass

Your vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see Compass0 88ii.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another. Some messages maynot require immediate action, butyou can press the set/reset buttonto acknowledge that you receivedthe message and clear it from theDIC display. Pressing any of theDIC buttons also acknowledges andclears any messages. Somemessages cannot be cleared fromthe DIC display because they aremore urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem. The followingare the possible messages that canbe displayed and some informationabout them.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatthe features are disabled, thismessage is displayed. It means thatthe vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the generator andbattery charging systems. Drivingwith this problem could drain thebattery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Stop and turn off the

vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical systemchecked by your dealer immediately.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays whenservice is required on the brakesystem. Have the brake systemserviced by your dealer as soon aspossible. The brake system warninglight also appears on the instrumentcluster when this message appearson the DIC. See Brake SystemWarning Light 0 99ii.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thedriver door is not closed properly.Make sure that the door is closedcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

If your vehicle has the remote startfeature, this message displays whenthe hood is not closed properly.Make sure that the hood is closedcompletely. See Hood 0 202ii.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thedriver side rear door is not closedproperly. Make sure that the door isclosed completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thefront passenger door is not closedproperly. Make sure that the door isclosed completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays when thepassenger side rear door is notclosed properly. Make sure that thedoor is closed completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message displays when thetrunk is not closed completely. Makesure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Trunk 0 31ii.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor is automatically turnedoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle. If thismessage continues to appear, havethe system repaired by your dealeras soon as possible to avoidcompressor damage.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays along with acontinuous chime when the enginehas overheated. Stop and turn theengine off immediately to avoidsevere engine damage. See EngineOverheating 0 212ii.

SERVICE A/C (AirConditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays whenservice is required for the vehicle.See your dealer. See Engine Oil0 204ii and Maintenance Schedule0 270ii.

Acknowledging the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.See “Oil Life” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 104ii andEngine Oil Life System 0 206ii.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil 0 204ii.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument cluster. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light 0 102ii.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possiblewhen this message is displayed.



Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when yourvehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. See FuelGauge 0 94ii and Filling the Tank0 190ii for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may be displayed ifthe gas cap is not on, or is not fullytightened. Check the gas cap toensure that it is on properly. SeeFilling the Tank 0 190ii for moreinformation.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced. To replace the battery, see“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 25ii.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125ii

for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125ii

for more information.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays as areminder to turn off the turn signal ifyou drive your vehicle for more thanabout 1.2 km (0.75 mile) with a turnsignal on. See Turn andLane-Change Signals 0 127ii.

This message displays and a chimesounds only when the ignition is inON/RUN. The message will notdisappear until the turn signal ismanually turned off, or a turn iscompleted.



Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays if there has beena problem detected with ESC. TheESC/TCS light also appears on theinstrument cluster. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 184ii and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight 0 101ii.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Tryresetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If thismessage still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have thesystem inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), this messagedisplays when the system is notfunctioning properly. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrumentcluster. See Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight 0 101ii. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 184ii.Have the TCS serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage may display and the ESC/TCS light on the instrument clustermay be on after first driving thevehicle and exceeding 30 km/h(19 mph) for 30 seconds. The ESCsystem is not functional until thelight has turned off. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 184ii.

STABILITRAK OFF

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays when the ESC isturned off manually. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 184ii.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays when the TCSturns off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 184ii.

This message may display when theignition is in ON/RUN anddisappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgentwarning appears.

Any of the following conditions maycause the TCS to turn off:

. The TCS is turned off bypressing the traction controlbutton. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control0 184ii.

. The battery is low.



TRACTION CONTROL ON

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), this messagedisplays when the TCS is turned on.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 184ii.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when thereis a problem with the airbag system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 96ii for moreinformation.

Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem programmed in the key.A fault has been detected in thesystem which means that thesystem is disabled and it is notprotecting the vehicle. The vehicleusually restarts; however, you maywant to take the vehicle to your

dealer before turning off the engine.See Immobilizer Operation 0 34ii formore information.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if thetheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle. See VehicleAlarm System 0 33ii for moreinformation.

Service Vehicle Messages

ERROR

This message displays whileviewing the odometer or tripodometers if there is a problem withthe instrument cluster. See yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays and a chimemay sound when there may be aproblem with the power steeringsystem. If this message displaysand a reduction in steeringperformance or loss of powersteering assistance is noticed, seeyour dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays if the startingof the engine is disabled due to theelectronic throttle control system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

This message only appears whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN, and willnot disappear until the problem isresolved.

This message cannot beacknowledged.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes and



then remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight 0 102ii. Several conditions maycause this message to appear. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 237ii for more information. If thewarning comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection 0 240ii, TireRotation 0 240ii, Tire PressureMonitor System 0 236ii, and TirePressure 0 235ii for moreinformation.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low. This message

also displays LEFT FRT (left front),RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR(left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)to indicate the location of the lowtire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light 0 102ii. You canreceive more than one tire pressuremessage at a time. To read theother messages that may have beensent at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stopas soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tires 0 228ii,Vehicle Load Limits 0 168ii, and TirePressure 0 235ii. The DIC alsoshows the tire pressure values. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 104ii.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when thetransmission fluid in your vehicle istoo hot. Stop the vehicle and allow itto idle until it cools down. If thewarning message continues todisplay, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.



Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer reservoir assoon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 203ii forthe location of the windshieldwasher reservoir. Also, see WasherFluid 0 214ii for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle has customizationcapabilities that allow you toprogram certain features to onepreferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain onthe battery, it is recommendedthat the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.



Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default) : All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS : All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL : All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See“Programmable Automatic DoorUnlock” under Automatic DoorLocks 0 30ii for more information.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF : None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT : Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK : Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park) .

ALL AT KEY OUT : All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default) : All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if any ofthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 25ii for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings



for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

HORN & LIGHTS OFF : There willbe no feedback when you press thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY : The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY : The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS ON (default) :The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press the lock button on theRKE transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button ispressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 25ii for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF : The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default) : The exteriorlamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors will be delayed.When locking the doors with thepower door lock switch and a dooris open, this feature will delaylocking the doors until five secondsafter the last door is closed. You willhear three chimes to signal that thedelayed locking feature is in use.The key must be out of the ignitionfor this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed lockingby pressing the power door lockswitch twice or the lock button onthe RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking 0 30ii.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings



for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF : There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default) : The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this

feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF : The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default) : Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE : The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES : The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF : The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default) : If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 25ii for moreinformation.





CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL : The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD : The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start feature

allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart 0 27ii for more information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF : The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default) : The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default) : Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE : Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit theFEATURE SETTINGS menu.

Press the customization button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS VTO EXIT appears in the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.



If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of theFEATURE SETTINGS menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

. The vehicle is no longer inON/RUN.

. The trip/fuel or vehicleinformation DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 295ii.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, the Universal HomeRemote System provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist inprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in othervehicles, as well as for futureprogramming. Only the originalremote control transmitter is neededfor Fixed Code programming. Theprogrammed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons” inthis section.

Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate that is being programmed.



Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers sold after1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressthe two outside buttons at thesame time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. In the garage, locate thegarage door opener receiver(motor-head unit). Locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button.It can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. Afterpressing this button, completethe following steps in less than30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote button

that will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

4. Immediately, withinone second, release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

5. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1–5, choosing a differentfunction button in Step 3 than whatwas used for the garage dooropener.

If these instructions do not work, thegarage door opener is probably aFixed Code unit. Follow the



Programming instructions that followfor a Fixed Code garage dooropener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover onthe hand-held transmittersupplied by the manufacturerof the garage door openermotor. If there is a row of dipswitches similar to the graphicabove, the garage door openeris a Fixed Code unit. If you donot see a row of dip switches,return to the previous sectionfor Programming UniversalHome Remote – Rolling Code.

Your hand-held transmitter canhave from eight to 12 dipswitches depending on thebrand of transmitter.

The garage door openerreceiver (motor head unit)could also have a row of dipswitches that can be usedwhen programming theUniversal Home Remote. If thetotal number of switches on themotor head and hand-heldtransmitter is different, or if thedip switch settings aredifferent, use the dip switchsettings on the motor head unitto program the Universal HomeRemote. The motor head dipswitch settings can also beused when the originalhand-held transmitter is notavailable.



Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches mightnot appear exactly as they doin the examples above, butthey should be similar.

The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled, as follows:

. A switch in the up positioncould be labeled as “Up,”“+,” or “On.”

. A switch in the downposition could be labeled as“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeled as“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

2. Write down the eight to 12switch settings from left to rightas follows:

. When a switch is in the upposition, write “Left.”

. When a switch is in thedown position, write “Right.”

. If a switch is set betweenthe up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settings writtendown in Step 2 will nowbecome the button strokesto be entered into theUniversal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter theswitch settings written downin Step 2, in order from leftto right, into the UniversalHome Remote, whencompleting Step 4.

1. Left Button ("Up," "+,"or "On.")

2. Middle Button ("Middle," "0,"or "Neutral.")

3. Right Button ("Down," "-,"or "Off.")

1. From inside your vehicle, firstfirmly press all three buttons atthe same time for aboutthree seconds. Release thebuttons to put the UniversalHome Remote intoprogramming mode.

2. The indicator lights will blinkslowly. Enter each switchsetting from Step 2 into yourvehicle's Universal Home



Remote. You will have two andone-half minutes to completeStep 4. Now press one buttonon the Universal Home Remotefor each switch setting asfollows:

. If you wrote “Left,” pressthe left button in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button in thevehicle.

3. After entering all of the switchpositions, again, firmly pressand release all three buttons atthe same time. The indicatorlights will turn on.

4. Press and hold the button thatwill be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator lightabove the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

5. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

6. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1–8, choosing a differentbutton in Step 6 than what was usedfor the garage door opener.

Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least one-half of asecond. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is beingtransmitted.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Code orFixed Code on the Universal HomeRemote device:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons,begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights beginto blink, release both buttons.The codes from all buttons willbe erased.



For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices 0 287ii.


Lighting 125

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 125Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 127Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . 130Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 130Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Battery Load Management . . . 130Battery Power Protection . . . . . 131

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off) : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on. For vehicles first soldin Canada, the off position onlyworks when the vehicle is shiftedinto the P (Park) position.

AUTO (Automatic) : Automaticallyoperates the headlamps and otherexterior lamps at normal brightness.

; (Parking Lamps) : Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps) : Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps will turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before automaticallyturning off to prevent the batteryfrom being drained. Turn theheadlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped) :Turns on the fog lamps.

See Fog Lamps 0 128ii.


126 Lighting

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, push the turnsignal lever away from you.

This instrument cluster light3comes on if the high-beam lampsare turned on while the ignition is inON/RUN.

To change the headlamps from highbeam to low beam, pull the turnsignal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:

. The ignition is in the ON/RUNposition.

. The exterior lamps control isin AUTO.

. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, the regularheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps are not on. Theinstrument panel and cluster arealso not on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on the

darkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel because itworks with the DRL.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for the


Lighting 127

lamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flashers let youwarn others that you have aproblem.

The hazard warning flasher buttonis on top of the steering column.

| (Hazard Warning Flashers) :Press to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.Press again to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterwill flash in the direction of the turnor lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lane

change is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers0 224ii.

Turn Signal On Chime

If either one of the turn signals areleft on and the vehicle has beendriven more than 1.2 km (0.75 mile),a chime will sound.


128 Lighting

Fog Lamps

# (Fog Lamps) : If equipped, thebutton is on the exterior lampscontrol. The exterior lamps control islocated on the instrument panel tothe left of the steering column.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUNposition for the fog lamps tocome on.

Press # to turn the fog lamps on oroff. A light will come on in theinstrument cluster.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps alsogo off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

D (Instrument PanelBrightness) : This knob is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel. Push the knob inall the way until it extends out andthen turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights. Push the knob back inwhen finished.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, thecourtesy lamps automatically comeon. They make it easy for you to


Lighting 129

enter and leave your vehicle. Youcan also manually turn these lampson by fully turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwise.

The reading lamps, located on therearview mirror, can be turned on oroff independent of the automaticcourtesy lamps, when the doors areclosed.

Dome Lamps

The center mounted dome lampoverhead comes on when a door isopened. This lamp can also beturned on by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwise.

Reading Lamps

The vehicle has reading lamps thatalso act as the dome lamp. Pressthe button near each lamp to turnthem on and off.

Map Lamps

The vehicle has map lamps on therearview mirror. Press the buttonnear each lamp on the mirror to turnthe map lamps on and off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingIf equipped with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever the unlock symbol ispressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turn offautomatically about 20 secondsafter the door is closed. If the unlocksymbol is pressed and no door isopened, the lamps turn off afterabout 20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turn offat the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim and thengo out. The delay time is canceled ifthe ignition key is turned to ON/RUNor the power door lock switch ispressed. The lamps will dimright away.


130 Lighting

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminatesthe interior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:

. The ignition is in ON/RUN.

. The doors are locked.

. An illumination period of about25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period adoor is opened, the timedillumination period is canceled andthe interior lamps remain on.

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interiorfor a period of time after the key isremoved from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on until oneof the following occurs:

. The ignition is in ON/RUN.

. The power door locks areactivated.

. An illumination period of20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period adoor is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain onbecause a door is open.

Parade DimmingParade mode automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrument paneldisplays during the daylight whilethe headlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.


Lighting 131

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE. If this messagesdisplays, it is recommended that thedriver reduce the electrical loads asmuch as possible. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 104ii.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if theinterior courtesy lamps, reading/maplamps, visor vanity lamps, or trunklamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, theyautomatically turn off after10 minutes, if the ignition is off. Thelamps will not come back on againuntil one of the following occurs:

. The ignition is turned on.

. The exterior lamps control isturned off, then on again.

The headlamps will time out after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on with the ignition on or off.


132 Infotainment System

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 133Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 142Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 143

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:

. Become familiar with theoperation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving 0 162ii.

Caution

Contact your dealer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere with theoperation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 176ii for more information.


Infotainment System 133

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation




Radio with CD (MP3)

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its infotainment system.

Softkeys

The Radio with CD (MP3) has sixsoftkeys located below the radiodisplay. Softkeys are used to controlfunctions that appear on the radiodisplay as tabs directly above thesoftkeys.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume) : Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

4 (Information) : Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV) : Radios with the SCVfeature automatically adjust theradio volume to compensate forroad and wind noise as the vehiclespeeds up or slows down, so thatthe volume level is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press MENU to display theradio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM tab on the radiodisplay.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low,Med, or High) to select thelevel of radio volumecompensation. The displaytimes out after approximately10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radiovolume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.



Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)Radio with CD

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.



EQ (Equalization) : Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) Radio withCD (MP3)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble) : To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.



If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds.

EQ (Equalization) : Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treblereturns the EQ to the manual bassand treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the` button or press

the f knob until the speakercontrol label displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio withCD (MP3)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade) : Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.



To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error : Displays if theradio is no longer calibratedproperly for the vehicle. The vehiclemust be returned to your dealer forservice.

Loc or Locked : Displays when theTheftLock® system has activated.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

4 (Information) (RDS Features) :For vehicles with RDS features,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information

displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Auto Text (RDS Features) : Ifadditional information is availablefor the current song being played,Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radiodisplay.

If 4 is pressed and the song title orartist information is longer than whatcan be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.

Finding a Station

BAND : Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or SiriusXM (ifequipped) on the Radio with CD(Base). Press to choose betweenFM, AM, SiriusXM (if equipped) onthe Radio with CD (MP3).

f (Tune) : Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK : Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.

. To seek stations, press andrelease © SEEK to go to theprevious station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold© SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press © SEEK again tostop scanning.

. To scan preset stations in theselected band, press and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until adouble beep sounds. The radiogoes to a stored preset, plays for



a few seconds, then goes to thenext stored preset. Press ©SEEK again to stop scanningpreset stations.

¨ SEEK : Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.

. To seek stations, press andrelease ¨ SEEK to go to thenext station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold¨ SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press ¨ SEEK again tostop scanning.

. To scan preset stations in theselected band, press and hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until adouble beep sounds. The radiogoes to a stored preset, plays fora few seconds, then goes to thenext stored preset. Press ¨SEEK again to stop scanningpreset stations.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked. See Defensive Driving0 162ii. Tune to stored radio stationsusing the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls, if thevehicle has this feature.

Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites, up to36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the FAV button.Press the FAV button to go throughup to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AM,FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped,stations.

Radios that do not have a FAVbutton store radio stations aspresets, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedpushbuttons.

Storing a Radio Station as aPreset, Radio with CD (Base)

Radios that have numberedpushbuttons store radio stations aspresets.

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM), can be programmed onthe six numbered buttons.

To store preset stations:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttons forthree seconds until a beepsounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to storeadditional radio stations.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite, Radio with CD (MP3)

Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.



3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 to storeadditional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the softkey locatedbelow the FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites.

Satellite Radio

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. SiriusXM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. If SiriusXMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display “No SubscriptionPlease Renew” on channel XM1.For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com orcall 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

4 (Information) (SiriusXM SatelliteRadio Service) : For vehicles withSiriusXM, press 4 to displayadditional text information related tothe current SiriusXM channel.If information is available, the songtitle information displays on the topline of the display and artist

information displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” displays.

Auto Text (Satellite RadioService) : If additional information isavailable for the current song beingplayed, Auto Text will automaticallypage/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radiodisplay.

If 4 is pressed and the song title orartist information is longer than whatcan be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.



Finding a SiriusXM Channel

BAND : Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped.

f (Tune) : Turn to manually select aSiriusXM channel.

© SEEK : Press to go to theprevious SiriusXM channel.

. To scan channels, press andhold © SEEK for a few secondsuntil the radio beeps once. Theradio goes to a channel, playsfor a few seconds, then goes tothe next channel. Press © SEEKagain to stop scanning.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nextSiriusXM channel.

. To scan channels, press andhold ¨ SEEK for a few secondsuntil the radio beeps once. Theradio goes to a channel, playsfor a few seconds, then goes tothe next channel. Press ¨ SEEKagain to stop scanning.

s REV : Press to go to theprevious SiriusXM category.

\ FWD : Press to go to the nextSiriusXM category.

Finding a Category (CAT)Channel

To find SiriusXM channels in acategory:

1. Press the CAT button todisplay the category tabs.Continue pressing the CATbutton until the desiredcategory name displays.

. Radios with CD and DVDcan also navigate thecategory list by pressing the\ FWD or thes REVbutton.

2. Press either of the two softkeysbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstSiriusXM channel in thatcategory.

To go to the previous or nextSiriusXM channel in theselected category, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the softkey below theright or left arrows in thecategory tab.

. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

3. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.

Adding and Removing Categories

Categories cannot be added orremoved while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

To add or remove a category:


2. Press the softkey under theSiriusXM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory you want to add orremove.

4. Press the softkey under theAdd or Remove tab.

To restore all removedcategories, press the softkeyunder the Restore All tab.



5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Storing SiriusXM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio channels while the vehicle isparked. See Defensive Driving0 162ii. Tune to stored radiochannels using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Up to 36 channels can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix softkeys below the radio channelfrequency tabs and by using theFAV button. Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritechannels available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM,or SiriusXM, if equipped, channels.

Storing an SiriusXM Channel as aFavorite

To store a channel as a favorite:

1. Tune to a SiriusXM channel.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the channelwill be stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 to storeadditional radio channels.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey under theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeyunder the displayed pagenumbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio channelfrequency tabs and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.



FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some static canoccur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing the soundto fade in and out.

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,

charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space between thegrid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Caution

Do not apply aftermarket glasstinting with metallic film. Themetallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.



Multi-Band AntennaThe roof antenna is for OnStar® (ifequipped), SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio (if equipped), and GPS(Global Positioning System). Keepclear of obstructions for clearreception. If the vehicle has asunroof, and it is open, receptioncan also be affected.

Audio Players

CD PlayerSome CD players can play MP3CD-R or CD-RW discs. See “MP3”later in this section for moreinformation.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single discs with anadapter ring.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a disc. It couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top ofthe disc if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners. Theycould damage the CD player.

Caution

If a label is added to a CD, morethan one CD is inserted into theslot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

could be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

Store a disc in its original case or aprotective case and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. If thebottom of a disc is damaged it maynot play properly or at all. Do nottouch the bottom of a disc whilehandling it. Pick it up by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is dirty, takea soft, lint-free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,



and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a Disc

Insert the disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the disc begins playing.

Use an adapter ring when playingthe smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs.Smaller discs with the adapter ringare loaded the same way as afull-size disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Z EJECT : Press to eject the disc.If the disc is not removed afterseveral seconds, the CD playerautomatically pulls the disc back in.

Playing a CD

When a CD is inserted into theplayer, the CD symbol displays. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhen a CD is in the player, the CDstays in the player. If the ignition orradio is turned on when a CD is in

the player, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

Buttons and Knobs

The buttons and knobs on the radiocontrol the following features.

f (Tune) : Turn to select tracks onthe CD.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than10 seconds have played. Press andhold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughthe tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through the tracks onthe CD.

s REV (Reverse) : Press and holdto reverse playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release to resumeplaying the track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward) : Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the track displays.Release to resume playing thetrack.

4 (Information) : Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND : Press to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the CD player.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) : Press toplay a CD while listening to theradio or a portable audio device.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.

Softkeys

The six softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control functionsthat display as tabs.



The softkeys below the radio displaycontrol the following features.

RDM (Random) : Tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey below theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3 Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3) has thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

The radio can also play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. When a disccontains both types of audio, the CDplayer reads all MP3 files first, thenthe uncompressed CD audio files.

Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:

. Up to 50 folders.

. Up to 8 folders in depth.

. Up to 50 playlists.

. Up to 255 files.

. Playlists with an .m3u or .wplextension.

. Files with an .mp3 or .cda fileextension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a disc display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

File Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe file extension as the track name.

Track names longer than 32characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename is not displayed.

Playlists

Discs that have playlists that werecreated using WinAmp®,MusicMatch®, or RealPlayer®

software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:

. Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.



. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When playback starts from a newfolder, the new track name displaysunless folder mode has beenchosen as the default display, thenthe new folder name displays.

Buttons and Knobs

The buttons and knobs on the radiocontrol the following features.

f (Tune) : Turn to select MP3 fileson the disc.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse) : Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Releases REV toresume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward) : Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing.

4 (Information) : Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND : Press to listen to the radiowhile an MP3 disc is playing. TheMP3 disc remains inside the CDplayer.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) : Press toplay an MP3 disc while listening tothe radio or a portable audio device.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable

audio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.

Softkeys

The six softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control functionsthat display as tabs.

The softkeys below the radio displaycontrol the following features.

Sc (Previous Folder) : Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder) : Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random) : MP3 files can belistened to on a CD in random,rather than sequential order. To userandom:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays to play songsfrom the current CD in randomorder.

2. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.



h (Music Navigator) : Press thesoftkey belowh to have the filesplayed in order by artist or album.The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey locatedbelow the Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeysbelow the Album tab from thesort screen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows andsongs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the disc andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC : If an error messagedisplays and/or the disc comes out,it could be for one of the followingreasons:

. The CD player is very hot. Whenthe temperature returns tonormal, the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. A problem occurred whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the disc is not playing correctly forany other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radio



displays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

The radio system may have anauxiliary input jack on the audiofaceplate. This is not an audiooutput; do not plug the headphoneset into the front auxiliary input jack.However, an external audio devicesuch as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer,or cassette tape player can beconnected to the auxiliary input jackas another source for audiolistening.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving 0 162ii for more informationon driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.While a device is connected, press

the radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume) : Turn toincrease or decrease the volume ofthe portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might need tobe made from the portable device.

BAND : Press to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing until it is stoppedor turned off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) : Press toplay a CD while a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input DeviceFound may display.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:

. Placement and receipt of calls ina hands-free mode.

. Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The system

can be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise : Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak : A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak : Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls 0 86ii.

b / g (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (End) : Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.



Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview 0 299ii.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The systemresponds with instructions anda four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want topair. For help with this process,see the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The systemresponds with “<phone name>has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”

. If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store : This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store : This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete : This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags : Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number orgroup of numbers you want tostore all at once with nopauses, then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.




2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call : The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial : This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say “911.”

4. Say "Dial" or "Call.”

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.



After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call commandto dial the number of the thirdparty to be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.



. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in the



phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement0 295ii.


156 Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . 156

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Climate Control SystemsThis vehicle may have a dual or single climate control system. The heating,cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation can be controlled with this system.If equipped with heated seats, see Heated Front Seats 0 44ii.

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air

3. Recirculation



6. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

7. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

8. Air Conditioning


Climate Controls 157

Single Zone

1. Fan Control

2. Outside Air

3. Temperature Control

4. Recirculation



7. Air Conditioning

Temperature Control : For dualzone, turn the thumbwheels up ordown to increase or decrease thetemperature on the driver or thepassenger side of the vehicle. For

single zone, turn the knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature.

9 (Fan Control) : Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Positioningthe knob between two modes canselect a combination of thosemodes.

If the airflow seems low when thefan is at the highest setting, thepassenger compartment air filtermay need to be replaced. There willbe some airflow noticeable from thevarious outlets when driving, even

with the fan in the off position. Formore information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter 0 160ii andMaintenance Schedule 0 270ii.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflowinside the vehicle.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level) : Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

6 (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield and sidewindow outlets. In this mode, thesystem automatically selectsoutside air.

- (Defog) : This mode clears thewindshield of fog or moisture. Air isdirected equally to the windshieldand the floor outlets. When defog isselected, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the air



conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is below 4 °C(40 °F).

0 (Defrost) : This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield with some air to the sidewindow vents and the floor vents.When defrost is selected, thesystem automatically forces outsideair into the vehicle. The airconditioning compressor will runautomatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is below 4 °C (40 °F).

# (Air Conditioning) : Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that it is on. The airconditioning can be selected in anymode as long as the fan is on andthe outside temperature is abovefreezing. A flashing indicator lightindicates that the air conditioningcompressor is currently notavailable.

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the time

it takes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, dothe following:

1. Select theH mode.

2. Press the# button.

3. Select the coolest temperaturefor both zones.

4. Select the highest9 speed.

5. When the coolest temperatureis selected in the A/C mode,the system automatically goesinto the recirculation mode toimprove cooling.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air inside the vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water may drip

under the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

% (Outside Air) : Press to turnon outside air. An indicator lightcomes on to show that it is on.Outside air will circulate throughoutthe vehicle.

/ (Recirculation) : Press toturn on the recirculation mode. Anindicator light comes on to showthat it is on.

This mode helps to quickly heat orcool the air inside the vehicle oncethe temperature inside the vehicle isequal to or better than the outsidetemperature. It can be used toreduce the entry of outside air andodors. The recirculation mode is notavailable in outside air, floor, defog,or defrost modes. If the button isselected while in these modes, theindicator flashes three times.


Climate Controls 159

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is in theLOCK/OFF position.

If equipped with heated outsiderearview mirrors, the mirrors heat tohelp clear fog or frost from thesurface of the mirror when the rearwindow defog button is pressed.See Power Mirrors 0 36ii.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

Air VentsUse the thumbwheel located belowor to the side of the outlet, tochange the direction of the air flow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside thevehicle more effectively.

. If the airflow seems low whenthe fan is at the highest setting,the passenger compartment airfilter, if equipped, may need toreplaced. For more information,see Passenger Compartment AirFilter 0 160ii and MaintenanceSchedule 0 270ii.



. If fogging reoccurs while in ventor bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the airconditioner to reduce windshieldfogging.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule 0 270ii.

See your dealer regardingreplacement of the filter.


Driving and Operating 161

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 163Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 164Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 165Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 166Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 168Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 171Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 173Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 177Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 179Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 189Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198


162 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts0 47ii.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.



{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

This vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid 0 213ii.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequire increased effort. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.



. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.



The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.

Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 228ii.

. Turn off cruise control.



Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 184ii.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied soonerthan when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 182ii.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwise



clear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 289ii. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 178ii.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.



If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 184ii.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forth

between R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 258ii.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it may

properly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the original

equipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires 0 228ii and TirePressure 0 235ii.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It may show the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to



your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 196ii forimportant information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 91 kg(200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay show the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unlessneeded.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 196ii for the trailer towingcapabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 176ii

This position locks the ignition andsteering wheel. It also locks thetransmission. This is the onlyposition in which the ignition keycan be inserted or removed.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom left to right while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoes not work, then the vehicleneeds service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF. On



vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift levermust be in P (Park) to turn theignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 183ii.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This is theposition in which you can operatethe radio and windshield wiperswhile the engine is off. To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the keyclockwise.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning chime will sound and theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay DRIVER DOOR OPENwhen the driver door is opened, theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or

LOCK/OFF, and the key is in theignition. See Door Ajar Messages0 108ii.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 198ii.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.



Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damagemay occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition to START. When theengine starts, let go of the key.The idle speed will slow downas the engine warms. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUELLEVEL LOW message isdisplayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theComputer-Controlled Cranking

System is disabled to preventpossible vehicle componentdamage. When this happens,hold the ignition switch in theSTART position to continueengine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forup to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least

15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,repeat these steps. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterIf equipped, the engine coolantheater can provide easier startingand better fuel economy duringengine warm-up in cold weatherconditions at or below −18 °C (0 °F).Vehicles with an engine coolantheater should be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting.

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.



2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord isattached to the diagonal braceon the driver side of the enginecompartment.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detection

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could makeit overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts, and prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows

The radio will work when the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the radio willcontinue to work for 10 minutes oruntil the driver door is opened. Thepower windows will continue to workfor up to 10 minutes or until anydoor is opened.

Shifting Into Park

Steering Column Shift Lever

If the vehicle has a steering columnshift lever, use this procedure toshift the vehicle into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Move the shift lever intoP (Park) by pulling the shiftlever toward you and moving itup as far as it will go.

3. With your foot still holding thebrake pedal down, set theparking brake. See ParkingBrake 0 183ii for moreinformation.

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leave thevehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, the vehicle is inP (Park).

Console Shift Lever

If the vehicle is equipped with aconsole shift lever, use thisprocedure to shift the vehicle intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Move the shift lever intoP (Park) by pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. While keeping the brake pedalapplied, set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 183ii formore information.

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leave thevehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, the vehicle is inP (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 176ii.If you are towing a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 193ii.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure yourvehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. See Parking Brake0 183ii for more information.

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To prevent

torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park” inthis section.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of Park

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock

The vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lockrelease is designed to:

. Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock is always functionalexcept in the case of an unchargedor low voltage (less than 9 volt)battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 256ii.

Console Shift

If the console shift lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park):

1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.See Ignition Positions 0 172ii.

3. Let up on the shift lever andmake sure the shift lever ispushed all the way intoP (Park).

4. Press the shift lever button.

5. Move the shift lever into thedesired gear.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.



Column Shift

If the column shift lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park):

1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position. See IgnitionPositions 0 172ii.

3. Shift out of the P (Park)position to the N (Neutral)position.

4. Move the vehicle to a safelocation.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 176ii andEngine Exhaust 0 178ii.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 193ii.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever on the console betweenthe seats, or on the steeringcolumn. Gear positions areindicated on the instrument cluster.



P : This position locks the frontwheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

could be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 176ii andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 193ii.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brake before shifting fromP (Park) when the ignition key is inON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever, then push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park0 177ii.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 168ii.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

. Going less than 56 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Caution

If the vehicle accelerates slowly,or does not shift gears, thetransmission could be damaged.Have the vehicle servicedright away.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See "Skidding" underLoss of Control 0 164ii.

L : This position gives you accessto gear ranges. This provides moreengine braking but lower fueleconomy than D (Drive). You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. See Manual Mode0 181ii.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmission,which can help control the vehicle'sspeed while driving downhill ortowing a trailer. The vehicle has anelectronic shift position indicatorwithin the instrument cluster. Whenusing the ERS mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicating thecurrent range that has beenselected.



To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the + (Plus) or − (Minus)button on the left side of thesteering wheel, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Thenumber displayed in the DIC is thehighest gear that the transmissionwill be allowed to operate in. Allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle.The transmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lower gearrange if the engine speed istoo high.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 100ii.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to

avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The parking brake is located to theleft of the brake pedal, near thedriver door.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down, then push downthe parking brake pedal.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down and push theparking brake pedal. When you liftyour foot off the parking brakepedal, the pedal will follow it to thereleased position.

A warning chime will sound and abrake warning light on theinstrument cluster will come on,if the parking brake is set, theignition is on, and the vehicle speedis greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on any hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 193ii.



Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and an ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

ESC activates when the vehiclesenses a difference between theintended path and the direction thevehicle is actually traveling. ESCselectively applies braking pressureto any one of the vehicle wheel

brakes to assist the driver inkeeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andTCS or ESC begins to limit wheelspin, cruise control will disengage.Cruise control may be turned backon when road conditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 168ii

and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when ESC is activated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC),and d comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.



3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The TCS/ESC button is on theinstrument panel.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease theY button. Theappropriate DIC message displays.See Ride Control System Messages0 111ii.

To turn TCS on again, press andrelease theY button. Theappropriate DIC message displays.See Ride Control System Messages0 111ii.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whentheY button is pressed, thesystem will not turn off until thewheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and ESC,press and hold theY button until

the ESC Off light g comes on andstays on in the instrument cluster.The appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride Control SystemMessages 0 111ii.

To turn TCS and ESC on again,press and release theY button.

The ESC Off light g in theinstrument cluster will turn off. The

appropriate DIC message displays.See Ride Control System Messages0 111ii.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 200ii.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

This vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and when the systembegins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 184ii. When road

conditions allow the cruise control tobe safely used again, it can beturned back on.

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

J (On/Off) : Press to turn cruisecontrol on or off. A white indicatorcomes on in the instrument clusterwhen cruise is on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate) : Ifthere is a set speed in memory,press briefly to resume to thatspeed or press and hold to

accelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET– : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ (Cancel) : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

The cruise control light on theinstrument cluster comes on afterthe cruise control has been set tothe desired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 93ii.

IfJ is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. KeepJoff when cruise is not being used.

1. Press theJ button to turn thecruise system on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET–.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.



The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green afterthe cruise control has been set tothe desired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 93ii.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or [ is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, briefly press+RES. The vehicle returns to thepreviously selected speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold +RES until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 93ii.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmaller increments, briefly pressSET−. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 93ii.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, the

vehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing the SET– button will resultin cruise control set to the currentvehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed. When going downhill, youmight have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep your speeddown. If the brake pedal is applied,the cruise control will disengage.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. To disengage cruise control,step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [.



. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off the cruise control,pressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased from memory ifJ is pressed or the ignition isturned off.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or FlexFuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel 0 190ii.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with anoctane rating below 87, as it maycause engine damage and will lowerfuel economy.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and



other fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 98ii.If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer for diagnosis. If itis determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 188ii.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.



Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Fuel 0 188ii.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuel website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

The starting characteristics of E85or FlexFuel make it unsuitable foruse when temperatures fall below−18 °C (0 °F). Use gasoline or addgasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank 0 190ii.

Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop, then unscrew thecap all the way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle. If the vehicle has E85 fuelcapability, the fuel cap will be yellowand state that E85 or gasoline canbe used. See E85 or FlexFuel0 190ii.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the fuel capon the hook on the inside of thefuel door.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 260ii.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 98ii.



The TIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Fuel SystemMessages 0 110ii.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 98ii.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Towing

General TowingInformationIf this is a police vehicle, see"Trailer Towing" in the Impala PolicePackage Supplement for trailertowing information.

Only use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:

. For information on driving whiletowing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle0 258ii. For information on towing the

vehicle behind another vehicle suchas a motor home, see RecreationalVehicle Towing 0 258ii.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500mi), to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode 0 181ii. Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.


. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 178ii.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as the



vehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees, or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes, or stopping.



When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes before

turning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 212ii.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:

1.1. Start the engine.

1.2. Shift into a gear.

1.3. Release the parkingbrake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule 0 270ii.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axle



lubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 212ii.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, threeimportant considerations have to dowith weight:

. Weight of the trailer.

. Weight of the trailer tongue.

. Total weight on your vehicle'stires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that canbe too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”following.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming the tow vehicle has thedriver, a front seat passenger, all therequired tow equipment, and it hasall the required trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices0 287ii.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total gross

weight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 168ii.



The trailer tongue (1) should weigh10% of the total loaded trailerweight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 168ii. Make sure not to go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.

. The rear bumper on the vehicleis not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,seal the holes when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust 0 178ii.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well orat all.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 98ii.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 63ii and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 64ii.


Vehicle Care 199

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 200California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 200

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 206Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 207Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 212Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . 213Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Battery - North America . . . . . . 216Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 217Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 218

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 218

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 223Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 223Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 224Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 230Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 245Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 247


200 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 255

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 258Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningWARNING: Most motor vehicles,including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive

harm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals.

See Battery - North America 0 216ii

and Jump Starting - North America0 256ii.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as


Vehicle Care 201

airbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 64ii.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 294ii.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck 0 64ii.


202 Vehicle Care

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 281ii.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the interior hood releasehandle with this symbol on it.It is to the left of the parkingbrake pedal.

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand release the secondaryhood latch, near the center ofthe hood front, by pushing thelatch to the right.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenpull the hood down and close itfirmly.


Vehicle Care 203

Engine Compartment Overview


204 Vehicle Care

1. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid0 214ii.

2. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 224ii.

3. Battery - North America 0 216ii.

4. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluid0 213ii.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. SeeEngine Oil 0 204ii.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. SeeEngine Oil 0 204ii.

7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 208ii.

8. Transmission Fluid Cap. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid0 207ii.

9. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 215ii.

10. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 207ii.

11. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant 0 209ii.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 206ii.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehicle

must be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overview0 203ii for the location of the engineoil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel orcloth, then push it back in allthe way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.


Vehicle Care 205

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil ” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications0 283ii.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the engine

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

has so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark thatshows the proper operatingrange, the engine could bedamaged. You should drain outthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 203ii for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 279ii.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.

Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.


206 Vehicle Care

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade, itis recommended to select an oil ofthe correct specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on

your skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. For

the oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages 0 109ii.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)


Vehicle Care 207

since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the system:

1. Using the DIC, display OILLIFE REMAINING. See DriverInformation Center (DIC)0 104ii.

2. Press and hold the Set/Resetbutton on the DIC for morethan five seconds. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealer.Contact your dealer for additionalinformation or the procedure can befound in the service manual. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 294ii

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule 0 270ii, and be sure to usethe fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 279ii.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview0 203ii for more information onlocation.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter, see Maintenance Schedule0 270ii.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine aircleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine air


208 Vehicle Care

cleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Unfasten the clips on top of theengine air cleaner/filterhousing.

2. Lift the filter cover housingaway from the engine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

5. Lower the filter cover housingtoward the engine.

6. Fasten the clips on the top ofthe housing to lock the cover inplace.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

When it is safe to lift the hood:

1. Engine Cooling Fans (Outof View)

2. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap


Vehicle Care 209

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant mixture. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 279ii andMaintenance Schedule 0 270ii.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 212ii.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Depending onthe engine, use a 50/50 mixtureof deionized water or clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of deionizedwater or clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant. If using thismixture, nothing else needs to beadded.


210 Vehicle Care

This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolant

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 279ii.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.


Vehicle Care 211

Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

come out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

The coolant surge tank pressurecap can be removed when thecooling system, including the surgetank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the markpointed to on the front of thecoolant surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tankcap off, start the engine and letit run until the upper radiatorhose starts getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches themark pointed to on the front ofthe coolant surge tank.

5. Replace the cap tightly.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.


212 Vehicle Care

Engine OverheatingThe coolant temperature gauge andthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on the instrumentcluster indicate an overheatedengine condition. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 95ii

and Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light 0 101ii.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 289ii.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fansshould be running. If not, do notcontinue to run the engine, andhave the vehicle serviced.

Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode 0 213ii forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem might not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning displays withno sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anengine coolant temperature warninglight no longer displays, the vehiclecan be driven. Continue to drive thevehicle slowly for about 10 minutes.Keep a safe vehicle distance fromthe vehicle in front. If the warningdoes not come back on, continue todrive normally and have the coolingsystem checked for proper fill andfunction.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.


Vehicle Care 213

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode0 213ii.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to asafe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode, which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders, helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, there is significant loss inpower and engine performance.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on in theinstrument cluster, to indicate thevehicle has entered overheatedengine protection operating mode.The temperature gauge alsoindicates an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended distances

and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should beavoided.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overview0 203ii for information on the locationof the power steering fluid reservoir.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system oran unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Check the level after the vehicle hasbeen driven for at least 20 minutesso the fluid is warm.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and pull itstraight up.

4. Wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

5. Replace the cap andcompletely tighten it.

6. Remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.


214 Vehicle Care

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.When the engine is cold, the fluidlevel should be between MIN andMAX on the dipstick.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 279ii. Always use theproper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions before

use. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 203ii forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.


Vehicle Care 215

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or canbe heard all the time when thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 283ii.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrong

replacement brake parts areinstalled or if parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with GM approved DOT 3brake fluid as indicated on thereservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 203ii forthe location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on alevel surface, the brake fluid levelshould be between the minimumand maximum marks on the brakefluid reservoir.


216 Vehicle Care

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 99ii.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluidat the specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 270ii.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 279ii.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 203ii for battery location.


Vehicle Care 217

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 200ii.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 256ii for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


218 Vehicle Care

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 270ii.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For properwindshield wiper blade length andtype, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 280ii.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 219

Caution (Continued)

the vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the plastic latch inthe middle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


220 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs0 223ii.

For any bulb-changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

1. Sidemarker2. Low-Beam Headlamp3. High-Beam Headlamp4. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood0 202ii.

2. Remove the screw from theheadlamp assembly.

3. Pull up on the plastic headlampretainer and remove it.


Vehicle Care 221

4. Pull the headlamp assemblyaway from the vehicle andremove the electricalconnector.

5. Remove the round dust caps togain access to the bulbs.

6. Turn the old bulbcounterclockwise and remove itfrom the retaining ring bypulling it away from theheadlamp.

7. Remove the electricalconnector from the bulb byraising the lock tab and pullingthe connector away from thebulb's base.

8. Install the electrical connectorto the bulb.

9. Install the new bulb by insertingthe smallest tab on the bulbbase into the matching notch inthe retaining ring. Turn the bulba quarter-turn clockwise until itstops.

10. Reinstall the dust caps.

11. Push the headlamp assemblytoward the vehicle.

12. Push down on the plasticheadlamp retainer to reinstall it.

13. Reinstall the screw from theheadlamp assembly.


222 Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

1. Rear Sidemarker Lamp2. Back-up Lamp3. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn

Signal

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk0 31ii.

2. Remove the convenience net,if equipped. Unhook the netfrom the upper wing nut.

3. Turn the upper wing nutcounterclockwise andremove it.

4. Pull the carpet away from therear of the vehicle.

5. Turn the two hex nutscounterclockwise toremove them.

6. Pull out the taillamp assemblyand disconnect the wiringharness.

7. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove it.

8. Pull the old bulb straight out toremove it.

9. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks to install it.

10. Reverse Steps 1–7 to reinstall.


Vehicle Care 223

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws fromthe license plate lampassembly.

2. Pull the lamp assembly downand turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and out ofthe lamp assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstallthe license plate lampassembly.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-Up 921LL

Front Parking/TurnSignal

3157NAK

LicensePlate Lamp

194LL

Headlamps

High-Beam H9

Low-Beam H11

Sidemarker 194LL

Stoplamp,Taillamp, and TurnSignal

3057

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.


224 Vehicle Care

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located on the passenger side ofthe engine compartment, by thebattery. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 203ii for moreinformation on location.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


Vehicle Care 225

The vehicle may not have all of thefuses, relays, and features shown.

Fuses Usage

A/C CMPRSR Air conditioningcompressor

Fuses Usage

ABS MTR 1 Antilock brakesystem motor 1

ABS MTR 2 Antilock brakesystem motor 2

AIR PUMP Air pump

AIR SOL Air injectionreactor solenoid

AIRBAG/DISPLAY

Airbag/Display

AUX PWR Auxiliary power

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

BATT 4 Battery 4

BCM Body controlmodule

CHMSL/BCK-UP

Centerhigh-mountedstoplamp/Back-up lamp

DISPLAY Display

DRL 1 Daytime runninglamps 1


226 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

DRL 2 Daytime runninglamps 2

ECM IGN Engine controlmodule/Ignition

ECM/TCM Engine controlmodule/Transmissioncontrol module

EMISSIONS 1 Emissions 1

EMISSIONS 2 Emissions 2

ETC/ECM Electronic throttlecontrol, ECM

FAN 1 Cooling fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling fan 2

FOG LAMPS Fog lamps (ifequipped)

FSCM Fuel systemcontrol module

HDLP MDL Headlamp module

HORN Horn

HTD MIR Heated mirror

IGN 1 Ignition 1

INJ 2 Injector 2

Fuses Usage

INT LIGHTS Interior lamps

INT LTS/PNL DIM

Interior lamps/Instrument paneldimmer

LT HI BEAM Driver sidehigh-beamheadlamp

LT LO BEAM Driver sidelow-beamheadlamp

LT PARK Driver sideparking lamp

LT SPOT Left spotlamp

LT T/SIG Driver side turnsignal lamp

ONSTAR OnStar

PWR DROP/CRANK

Power drop/Crank

RADIO Audio system

RT HI BEAM Passenger sidehigh-beamheadlamp

Fuses Usage

RT LO BEAM Passenger sidelow-beamheadlamp

RT PARK Passenger sideparking lamp

RT SPOT Right spotlamp

RT T/SIG Passenger sideturn signal lamp

RVC SEN Regulated voltagecontrol sensor

STRG WHL Steering wheel

STRTR Starter

TRANS Transmission

VAC/PUMP Vacuum pump

WPR Wiper

WSW Windshield wiper

Relay Usage

A/CCMPRSR

Air conditioningcompressor

FAN 1 Cooling fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling fan 2


Vehicle Care 227

Relay Usage

FAN 3 Cooling fan 3

VACUUM/PUMP

Vacuum pump

PWR/TRN Powertrain

REARDEFOG

Rear defogger

STRTR Starter

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The fuse block is on the passengerside of the vehicle in the carpetmolding. Remove the fuse blockdoor to access the fuses.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

AIRBAG Airbags

AMP Amplifier

AUX Auxiliary outlets

CNSTR Canister

DR/LCK Door locks

HTD/SEAT Heated seats

Fuses Usage

PWR/MIR Power mirrors

PWR/SEAT Power seats

PWR/WNDW Power window

RAP Retainedaccessory power

S/ROOF Sunroof

TRUNK Trunk

TRUNK Trunk relay

XM SiriusXM radio


228 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 168ii.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfaces


Vehicle Care 229

and weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 229ii.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealer

for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 242ii.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. It is recommendedthat winter tires be installed on thevehicle if frequent driving attemperatures below approximately5 °C (40 °F) or on ice or snowcovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires 0 229ii.

Caution

High performance summer tireshave rubber compounds that loseflexibility and may developsurface cracks in the tread areaat temperatures below −7 °C (20 °F). Always store highperformance summer tiresindoors and at temperaturesabove −7 °C (20 °F) when not in

(Continued)


230 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

use. If the tires have beensubjected to −7 °C (20 °F) or less,let them warm up in a heatedspace to at least 5 °C (40 °F) for24 hours or more before beinginstalled or driving a vehicle onwhich they are installed. Do notapply heat or blow heated airdirectly on the tires. Alwaysinspect tires before use. See TireInspection 0 240ii.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size : The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the


Vehicle Care 231

manufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading 0 244ii.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only : Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire 0 255ii and If a Tire GoesFlat 0 247ii.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation : Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure0 235ii.

(6) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,


232 Vehicle Care

construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of


Vehicle Care 233

the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 235ii.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 168ii.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 168ii.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 168ii.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


234 Vehicle Care

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 168ii.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire that

contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 235ii and VehicleLoad Limits 0 168ii.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 241ii.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are


Vehicle Care 235

determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 244ii.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 168ii.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 168ii.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 168ii.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.


236 Vehicle Care

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire 0 255ii.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, no

further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire


Vehicle Care 237

tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 237ii.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure in

the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 168ii.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and details


238 Vehicle Care

about the DIC operation anddisplays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 104ii and TireMessages 0 112ii.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 168ii, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 235ii.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 240ii, Tire Rotation 0 240ii, andTires 0 228ii.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignition

cycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed and


Vehicle Care 239

the sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 242ii.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one or

more of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter's Qand K buttons at the sametime for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.


240 Vehicle Care

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 270ii.

Tires are rotated to achieve amore uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires 0 241ii and WheelReplacement 0 245ii.


Vehicle Care 241

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 235ii and VehicleLoad Limits 0 168ii.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 237ii.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 283ii.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could come

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

off and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection 0 240ii and Tire Rotation0 240ii.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. The


242 Vehicle Care

tire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number

will be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 230ii.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 240ii. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the winter


Vehicle Care 243

tires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 236ii.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 168ii.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if

(Continued)


244 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

tires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 242ii andAccessories and Modifications0 200ii.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls of

most passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 245

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.


246 Vehicle Care

Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.


Vehicle Care 247

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tires0 228ii. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if there ever is a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 127ii.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

(Continued)


248 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you will need is inthe trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk0 31ii.

2. Remove the convenience net,if equipped.

3. Remove the spare tire cover.

4. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise andremove it.

5. Remove the compactspare tire.


Vehicle Care 249

6. Turn the nut holding the jackcounterclockwise and removeit. Then remove the jack andwrench.

1. Jack2. Extension and Protection

Guide3. Wheel Wrench

The tools you will need to change atire include the jack (1), extensionand protection guide (2), and wheelwrench (3).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

This vehicle may have aluminumwheels with exposed wheel nuts.Use the wheel wrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

Or, this vehicle may have steelwheels with plastic covers.

To remove the plastic covers andwheel nut caps, loosen the plasticnut caps with the wheel wrench in acounterclockwise direction.If needed, finish loosening themwith your fingers. The plastic nutcaps will not come off.

If needed, use the flat end of thewheel wrench and pry along theedge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover couldbe sharp, so do not try to remove itwith your bare hands. Do not dropthe cover or lay it face down, as itcould become scratched ordamaged. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until the flat tire is repairedor replaced.


250 Vehicle Care

Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedureto remove the flat tire and install thespare tire.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 247ii.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise once on eachwheel nut to loosen it. Do notremove them yet.

3. For all wheel types, find thejacking location using thediagram above and thecorresponding jacking notcheslocated on the bottom side ofthe plastic molding. Thenotches in the plastic moldingare marked with a triangleshape to help you find them.

The front location is about17.7 cm (7.0 in) from the rearedge of the front wheel well.The rear location is about11.4 cm (4.5 in) from the frontedge of the rear wheel well.

4. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 251

Warning (Continued)

appropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground to install the compactspare tire.

6. Remove all wheel nuts and theflat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

7. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

8. Install the compact spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.


252 Vehicle Care

9. Reinstall the wheel nuts withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel. Tighten eachnut clockwise by hand until thewheel is held against the hub.

10. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer when

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

using accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 283ii for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 283ii for the wheel nut torquespecification.


Vehicle Care 253

11. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence asshown.

Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

After the compact spare tire hasbeen installed on the vehicle, storethe flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use theextension with the extensionprotector, located in the foamholder, to help avoid wheel surfacedamage.

To store a full-size tire:

1. Install the tools in their originallocation in the trunk area andsecure.

2. Place the tire valve stem facingdown and the protector/guideplaced through a wheel bolthole and threaded onto the boltscrew.

3. Remove the protector andattach the retainer securely.

4. Store the cover as far forwardas possible.

When storing a compact spare tirein the trunk, put the protector backin the foam holder.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can. See CompactSpare Tire 0 255ii. Use this as aguide for storing the compact sparetire and tools.


254 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire

1. Cover2. Retainer

3. Compact Spare Tire4. Wing Nut5. Jack6. Wheel Wrench7. Extension Protector8. Foam Holder9. Bolt Screw

Full-Size Flat Tire

1. Retainer2. Full-Size Flat Tire


Vehicle Care 255

3. Protective Guide4. Extension Bolt Screw5. Wing Nut6. Jack7. Wheel Wrench8. Foam Holder9. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare TireIf this is a police vehicle, see"Compact Spare Tire" in the ImpalaPolice Package Supplement forspare tire information.

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.

Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the AWD (if equipped), ABS, andTraction Control systems mayengage until the spare tire isrecognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


256 Vehicle Care

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 216ii.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 200ii.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

The jump start positive is located inthe engine compartment under theengine compartment fuse blockcover on the passenger side of thevehicle.

The jump start negative groundingpoint is the engine block or anengine mounting bolt. Connect to aspot as far away from thedischarged battery as possible.

These locations are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles sothat they are not touching.


Vehicle Care 257

3. Set the parking brake firmlyand put the shift lever inP (Park). See Shifting Into Park0 176ii.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart positive (+) post. Use aremote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

6. Do not let the other end of thered positive (+) cable touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of thenegative (–) cable does not goto the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (–)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to anunpainted heavy metal enginepart away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move.


258 Vehicle Care

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components. Use theproper straps around the tires tosecure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home. The


Vehicle Care 259

two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. What is the towing capacity ofthe towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing

Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.


260 Vehicle Care

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. If the vehicle must betowed, a dolly should be used. See“Dolly Towing” following.

Dolly Towing

To dolly tow the vehicle from thefront:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheelsare locked into the straightposition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 279ii.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 261

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be powerwashed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Wash

the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


262 Vehicle Care

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.


Vehicle Care 263

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climates

may require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 279ii.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning

(Continued)


264 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

brushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, mastercylinder, brake fluid reservoir,vacuum pipes, electric vacuumpump including bracket, and venthose, if equipped.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinges, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminated

fluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregular


Vehicle Care 265

dark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.


266 Vehicle Care

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.


Vehicle Care 267

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals can

(Continued)


268 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

cause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by one hook-type retainer.

1. Pull up on the rear of the matto remove it from the hooks.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the openings on the floormat over the hooks and push itdown into position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured in place.Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 269

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 269

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 270

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 281

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oil

changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more


270 Service and Maintenance

frequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 168ii.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 188ii.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 201ii.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 204ii.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 235ii.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 240ii.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 214ii.



Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 206ii.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 240ii.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 204ii and Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 206ii.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant 0 209ii.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 214ii.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 260ii. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 218ii.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 235ii.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 240ii.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 207ii.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 260ii.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care 0 260ii.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 53ii.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 260ii.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 217ii.



. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 217ii.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 218ii.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 218ii.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 38ii.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6)



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the air filter ateach engine oil change.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 208ii.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 215ii.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.

Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the air filter ateach engine oil change.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 208ii.



(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 215ii.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 260ii.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 279ii for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs



of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. For

information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 265ii andExterior Care 0 260ii.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See Engine Oil0 204ii.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant 0 209ii.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021185, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 20862288 A3146C

Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132

Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side - 55.0 cm (21.7 in) 20958934 —

Passenger Side - 55.0 cm (21.7 in) 92231677 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


282 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 284

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 283ii for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in the trunk, has thefollowing information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


Technical Data 283

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 279ii for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Automatic Transmission 5.0 L 5.3 qt

Cooling System Including Reservoir 8.7 L 9.1 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 66.3 L 17.5 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 3 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)


284 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing


Customer Information 285

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 288

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 288GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 292Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 297OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


286 Customer Information

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson BoulevardSuite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Limited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800



Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner manuals andview vehicle-specific how-to videos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar VehicleDiagnostic Information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I : View and print dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a preferred dealer andview locations, maps, phonenumbers, and hours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 282ii.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXMSatellite radio (if equipped), andOnStar account information (ifequipped).

F : Chat with online helprepresentatives.

See my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatured Articles and Auto CareSections.

. Download owner manuals.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program



This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number.

. Telephone number of yourlocation.

. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle’s powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer for



warranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 805 km (500mi).

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

. Legal fines.

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. If available,diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify. GeneralMotors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.



Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle



Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not

specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 289ii.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number.

. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.



If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 58ii.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehicle

repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information(U.S. and Canada Only)

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310,ICES‐001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the



OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 303ii.


OnStar 299

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription and data plan. OnStarrequires the vehicle battery andelectrical system, cellular service,and GPS satellite signals to beavailable and operating. OnStar actsas a link to existing emergencyservice providers. OnStar maycollect information about you andyour vehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Terms &

Conditions and Privacy Statementfor more details including systemlimitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.


300 OnStar

. Obtain the Wi-Fi® hotspot nameor SSID and password,if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive, OnStar subscription plan(excludes Basic Plan). WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.


OnStar 301

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Destination Download

Subscribers can have directionssent to the vehicle’s navigationscreen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar Wi-Fi® Hotspot (IfEquipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press=, wait forthe prompt, then say “Wi-Fisettings.” On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi Settings on thescreen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type


302 OnStar

(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple® iOS,Android™, BlackBerry®,or Windows® mobile devices.OnStar Subscribers can access thefollowing services from a mobiledevice:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send directions to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

For OnStar RemoteLink informationand compatibility, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can provide specialoffers from restaurants and retailerson your route, help locate hotels,or book a room.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service,which requires available minutes.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number



OnStar 303

2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsAdvanced Diagnostics provides astatus of the vehicle’s key systemswith a monthly e-mail, or bypressingQ. Real-time DiagnosticAlerts can be sent by e-mail or text.The Proactive Alerts feature (ifavailable) can help predict and alertof potential upcoming maintenanceissues with select components onthe vehicle, before they become aproblem.

OnStar can also monitor and reporttire pressure, if the vehicle isequipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase.PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.


304 OnStar

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance,Advanced Diagnostics, RemoteServices, Roadside Assistance,Turn-by-Turn Navigation, andHands-Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles. For moreinformation, a full description ofOnStar services, system limitations,and OnStar terms and conditions:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpSubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.


OnStar 305

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five dayswithout an ignition cycle. If the

vehicle has not been started forfive days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


306 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 198ii. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacy

statement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/us/en/support/getdocuments.html

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the


OnStar 307

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a


308 OnStar

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use of

the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


Index 309

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 198Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 207Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Passenger Sensing System . . . .59What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .55

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Passenger Status Indicator . . . . .96Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137AntennaBackglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 182Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

AudioTheft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 133

Audio PlayersCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143


310 Index

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

BBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142BatteryLoad Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Battery - North America . . . .216, 256Bimodal Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 218BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .99

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Brakes (cont'd)System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 171Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 223Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 222

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 189Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .200, 216, 256

Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 2CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . 83Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . 97CheckIgnition Transmission Lock . . . 218Malfunction Indicator EngineLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .67Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 79Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 156Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156


Index 311

Climate Control Systems (cont'd)Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 292Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Engine Temperature Gauge . . . .95Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 288Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 294

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 292Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 2Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 297Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 130Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 130Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Door (cont'd)Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 284Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .22Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 166If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 168Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 164Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 168Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 224


312 Index

Electrical System (cont'd)Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 203Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . .95Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Cooling System Messages . . . 109Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Engine (cont'd)Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 179Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 297Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 125

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 127Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 207Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Requirements, California . . . . . 189System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 224Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227


Index 313

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 119Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

GaugesEngine Coolant Temperature . . .95Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 269Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 127Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Headlamps (cont'd)Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 103High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 126

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 156High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 166Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 36

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . 110Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .25

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 230LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .98Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 72


314 Index

LightElectronic Stability Control(ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91LightingDelayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 128Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . .99Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . . 101

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 102Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 126

Lights (cont'd)Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . .95Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 270Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . 98Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . 109Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . .111Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 36


Index 315

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 171

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 206Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 65Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 288OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 301OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 303OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . 300OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Operating ModeOverheated EngineProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

OperationInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 133

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 294

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode . . . . 213

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 218

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 178Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 59

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 200

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 176Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . 51PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 296

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 291

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .200, 216, 256

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 295Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137


316 Index

Radios (cont'd)Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 258Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 65Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 296General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 284Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Safety Belts (cont'd)Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .53Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .51

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 296General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 291SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .43Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .42Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 77, 79SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33


Index 317

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Climate Control System . . . . . . . 156Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 201Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 281Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 282Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 291Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Special Application Services . . . . 276Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 27Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 217Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 288Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 34Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Pressure Monitor Operation . . 237Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 236Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Terminology and Definitions . . 232


318 Index

Tires (cont'd)Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 245When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 193Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197General Information . . . . . . . . . . 193Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 258Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 244Universal Remote System . . . . . . 119Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Identification Number (VIN) . . . 282Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . .113Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 245Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 71Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 218

Documents

Chevrolet Impala Limited Owner Manual (GMNA … · Chevrolet Impala Limited Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.- 9085358) - 2016 - crc - 8/20/15 Introduction 3 A circle with a slash